2011 Dodge Challenger SRT Owner`s Manual

2011 Dodge Challenger SRT Owner`s Manual
2011 Challenger S RT8
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11D492-126-AE
2011
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
Challenger S RT8
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
! Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ! Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
! How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ! Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
! Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR" parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
VIN Location
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
vehicle registration, and the title.
on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
! A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
! Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
! Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
! Sentry Key" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
! Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Remote Open Window Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
! Trunk Lock And Release
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26
! Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
! Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
! Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 51
! Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 51
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
! Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 34
! Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 55
! Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 62
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
! Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterAnd Operating” for further information.
N-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/
RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Emergency Key Removal
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key
Fob in the ignition or a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF with Keyless Enter-N-Go, and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition
switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start- seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
ing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. This condition will result in the engine being
information.
shut off after two seconds.
SENTRY KEY$
The Sentry Key" Immobilizer System prevents unauthor- If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 secsystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key" Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key" Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
CAUTION!
the authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in OFF.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key" system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided subject to the following conditions:
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• This device must accept any interference that may be Rearming Of The System
received, including interference that may cause unde- If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
sired operation.
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
after an additional 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Security Alarm will rearm itself.
and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security To Arm The System
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm:
decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
%Starting Procedures% in %Starting And Operating% for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make
sure the vehicle ignition system is %OFF%.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is %OFF% and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
vehicle:
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
Security Alarm.
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
exterior zone (refer to %Keyless Enter-N-Go% in %Things To
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle% for further informaalarm will sound.
tion).
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
(RKE) transmitter.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
3. If any doors are open, close them.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
To Disarm The System
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has ocVehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
tampering.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this ILLUMINATED ENTRY
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, doors or open any door.
pull on the front driver or passenger door handle (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information) with a valid
key fob in range, or press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/
Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle), or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch
(if the Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the
ON/RUN position.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
RKE transmitters.
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the %Dome ON% position (extreme top position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressRemote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
Fob removed.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set- 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- its previous setting.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN- 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
Fob removed.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to its previous setting.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitSettings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
steps:
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitsteps:
ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transand the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 secRefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the LOCK button.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
feature. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated Using The Panic Alarm
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
Remote Open Window Feature
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
This feature allows you to remotely lower both door
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
lower completely.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Open The Trunk
NOTE:
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two • The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
times within five seconds to open the trunk.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
and horn will remain on.
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
performed at an authorized dealer.
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
Transmitter Battery Replacement
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may operation.
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
General Information
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the following conditions:
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
elastomer seal during removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• This device must accept any interference received, maintaining security. The system has a range of approxiincluding interference that may cause undesired mately 300 ft (91 m).
operation.
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an autoNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
How To Use Remote Start
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal engine will remote start:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• Shift lever in PARK
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
• Doors closed
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Hood closed
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. • Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Ignition key removed from ignition switch
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• RKE PANIC button not pressed.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec• Vehicle theft alarm not active
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
WARNING!
cycle.
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
NOTE:
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carthen shut down 10 seconds later.
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
injury or death when inhaled.
Remote Start mode.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start • For security, power window and power sunroof opSystem, windows, door locks or other controls
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
could cause serious injury or death.
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
• Press and release the REMOTE START button one time
NOTE:
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Entercycle.
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enterbutton for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
N-Go feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On”
Start request.
will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob.
Once inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display
in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go DOOR LOCKS
feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will
Manual Door Locks
display in the EVIC until you push the START button.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
Cancel Remote Start
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Any engine warning lights come on
• Fuel lamp turns on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, Power Door Locks
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
2
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the Key
Fob in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the 3. All doors are closed
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For further
4. The throttle is pressed
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition,
and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter
Automatic Door Locks Programming —
If Equipped
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
following procedure:
did not enter the programming mode and you will
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
need to repeat the procedure.
switch.
• Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
with local laws.
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine). Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is ento lock the doors.
abled
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
programming.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK
its previous setting.
4. The driver door is opened
5. The doors were not previously unlocked
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
steps:
its previous setting.
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
2. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
in accordance with local laws.
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
OFF and ON/RUN and then back to OFF four times
ending up in the LOCK position. However, do not start
the engine.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IF EQUIPPED
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for
72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for the handle may
time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle
will reactivate the door handle’s Passive Entry feature.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside
NOTE: Both doors will unlock when the front passenger
the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically undoor handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
locks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the located on
the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid
above the license plate.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
NOTE:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
doors.
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
Power Windows
door. The window controls will operate only when the
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the door windows.
NOTE:
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis- removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symsion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) bol will display until the trunk is closed.
before the button will operate.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know
The trunk lid can be released from Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
outside the vehicle by pressing the trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
mitter twice within five seconds.
WARNING!
Trunk Release
Button
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
Emergency Release
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for
the driver and front outboard passenger
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
energy during an impact event
collision.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
buckled up in a rear seat.
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
CHildren (LATCH).
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat under &If You Need Assistance&.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
WARNING!
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
normal conditions. However, in an accident, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt
is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch plate
will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plate
and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Latch Plate
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snug.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
shoulder belt.
feature for each seating position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
Driver
Center
Passenger
anchor point.
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
Second Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
Third
Row
N/A
N/A
N/A
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
• N/A — Not Applicable
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
latch plate.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the ALR and is being used for normal usage:
folded webbing.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a %click.%
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
WARNING!
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert$)
BeltAlert" is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert") to fasten their seat belts. This feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened. BeltAlert" triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle
speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The reminder sequence lasts
for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts are
fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are
fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants
to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled
while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
BeltAlert" will chime as a single notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to
the 96 second reminder sequence.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert" is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert" may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert" Programming
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert".
The BeltAlert" can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
1. With both doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s
seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but The BeltAlert" can be reactivated by repeating this prodo not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder cedure.
Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert" is deactivated, the Seat Belt
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
driver’s seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat the best way to keep the baby safe.
belt buckled.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single Seat Belt Extender
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
completed the programming.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
extender. This extender should be used only if the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating position. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air 12 —
— Knee Bolster
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat position.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Air Bag System Components
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- system components:
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in • Air Bag Warning Light
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Steering Wheel and Column
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the
outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
NOTE:
covering both windows on the impact side.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air severe initial deceleration.
bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
required, depending on the severity and type of impact.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
•
•
•
•
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Cut off fuel to the engine.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
until the ignition key is turned off.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
removed.
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Unlock the doors automatically.
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the Maintaining Your Air Bag System
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
WARNING!
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inbe injured if the air bag system is not there to
structions for cleaning.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have dewiring, including adding any kind of badges or
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
bags will not be in place to protect you.
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
WARNING!
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
(Continued)
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
the rear seats rather than in the front.
child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Infants And Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
slouching can move the belt out of position.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belttheir back.
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
lap/shoulder belt.
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. CanaChildren Too Large For Booster Seats
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the
child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether
straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should never install LATCH-compatible
child seats so that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rearseating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
LATCH Anchorages
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
the strap.
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of the seatcover material. Then, rotate the tether anchorof reach of children. It is recommended that before
age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
Center
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recomPets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate Vehicle
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
Seat Belts
use the recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or retractor condition, replace the belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 ! Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
! Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ! Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
! Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
! To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 141
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
! Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
! Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
! Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Programming HomeLink" . . . . . . . . .
! Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
! Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 148
▫ Using HomeLink" . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Reprogramming A Single
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
HomeLink" Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 152
. . . . . 153
. . . . 156
. . . . . 156
. . . . . 156
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
! Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ! Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 ! Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 160 ! Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 ! Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth" “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Slide-On-Rod Extender
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- • or call 1–877–855–8400
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” '
“Mike” ' “Work” or “Dial” ' “248-555-1212”). Your
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth" “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth" technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice
(Uconnect™ Phone
Command
button) that will enable you
to access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth" mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or andetails.
other prompt.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi• For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth" Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth" enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
button on the radio control head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
button to begin.
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile • Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
priority level between one and seven, with one being
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number • The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
of certain radios.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Press the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Press the
“Call”.
button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call.
“Phonebook New Entry”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomyou can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previmended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
instead of “Bob”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth" Phones with Phone Book
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
main menu.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth" wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
NOTE:
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availwhen the vehicle is not in motion.
able for use.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
deleted or edited.
phone is accessible.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
book.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
entry that you wish to edit.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
phone connection.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
button while the
from the list, press the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• Press the
button to begin.
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you • To call one of the names in the list, press the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
button during the playing of the desired name, and
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
say “Call”.
deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language operations at this point.
is deleted.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
number designation you wish to call.
deleted or edited.
• The selected number will be dialed.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
Phone Call Features
• Press the
button to begin.
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a
call, press and hold the
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls Call Termination
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
time.
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Conference Call
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
joined into one conference call.
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
“Redial”.
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- using:
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
voice commands will be in that language.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency numNOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phoneMexico.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
Emergency Assistance
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
area.
number for your area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
some systems. To do this, press the
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
say “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
follows:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
• Press the
button to begin.
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• and have network coverage.
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• Press the
button to begin.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
“Towing Assistance”.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems”.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- call and then press the
vices require immediate response selection. In some system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
instances, that may be too quick for use of the say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
Uconnect™ Phone.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
NOTE:
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
network configurations. This is normal.
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
use of this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Press the
button to begin.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth" mobile
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
one of the following:
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
• Press the
button.
with one electronic device at a time.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth"
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
button and
phone being announced, press the
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec- Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
button to begin.
• Press the
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
This feature allows you to select and start using another
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
• Press the
button to begin.
prompts.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can also press the
button at any time while • Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
wish to delete.
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
Phone
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be comUconnect™ Phone Tutorial
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
switched off.
Voice Training
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizsystem will adapt to the last trained voice only.
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this Reset
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures: • press the
button.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
radio mode):
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from • When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium blower setting,
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomSend Messages:
ing and Missed Calls.
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
• Press the
button.
your phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Read Messages:
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will • You can either say the message you wish to send or say
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
If you wish to hear the new message:
button while the
To send a message, press the
• Press the
button.
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
11. See You in 15 minutes
1. Yes
12. I am on my way
2. No
13. I’ll be late
3. Where are you?
14. Are you there yet?
4. I need more direction.
15. Where are we meeting?
5. L O L
16. Can this wait?
6. Why
17. Bye for now
7. I love you
18. When can we meet
8. Call me
19. Send number to call
9. Call me later
20. Start without me
10. Thanks
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the
button.
Bluetooth" Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth" ON mode.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Power-Up
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
will then be given a choice to change it.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
button and say “Help” or “Main
Command
Menu”.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Commands
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
These commands are universal and can be used from any commands. Universal commands are available at all
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at Changing the Volume
a normal speaking volume.
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
this mode, you may say the following commands:
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Main Menu
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
menu.
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Setup
button first and wait for the beep
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
following:
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new Power Seats
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
SEATS
used to control the position of the seat.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats
The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped
with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
heaters provide the same average heat level for both the
cushion and the seatback.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the LOW-level after a maximum of
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of indicators illuminated changes from two to
one, indicating the change. Operation on the LOW-level
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
setting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum of
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
45 minutes.
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
of the instrument panel.
within two to five minutes.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
3
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center rear head restraint has two positions, up or
down. When the seat is being occupied the head restraint
should raised. When there are no occupants in the center
Push Button
seat position the head restraint can be lowered for NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
maximum visibility for the driver.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Folding Rear Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
3
Hood Release Lever
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Safety Catch
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
and instrument panel light operation.
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instru- Automatic Headlights
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights. This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition
in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
LIGHTS
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights, or place the
ignition in the RUN position, the system will cancel the
delay.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
turn off in the normal manner.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
Headlight Time Delay
feature.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
unlit area.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Fog Lights
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
The front fog light switch is built into the headRunning Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
RUN position, the headlights are off and the parking
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
normal nighttime driving.
lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off
the headlight switch.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert when the fog lights are turned on.
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch turned fully upward, past the second detent.
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
3
Overhead Console
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
position.
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is located to the right of the headlight switch. With the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if so
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door
handles and cupholders.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
Mist Feature
selected.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
continue to operate until you release the multifunction and then turn off.
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
the steering column.
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until right side of the steering wheel.
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 4 — CANCEL
3 — SET accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec(40 km/h).
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
To Accelerate For Passing
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
increase until the button is released, then the new set
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
speed will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
moderate hills is normal.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
3
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Overhead Console
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink") button and a power sunroof switch may
also be included, if equipped.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when The HomeLink" buttons are located in the overhead
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) console designating the different HomeLink" channels.
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a %push/push% design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
HomeLink" replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
HomeLink" Buttons
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security NOTE: HomeLink" is disabled when the Vehicle Secusystems. The HomeLink" unit operates off your vehicle’s rity Alarm is active.
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink$
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink" buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink" for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
from the HomeLink" buttons while keeping the EVIC may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
display in view.
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand- 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink" button. If
held transmitter away from the HomeLink".
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink" button and the handheld transmitter button If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINuntil the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # ING” repeat Step 3.
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
NOTE: After training a HomeLink" channel, if the
Then release both the HomeLink" and handheld trans- garage door does not operate with HomeLink" and the
mitter buttons.
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
to Step 5.
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
the “learn” or “training” button.
garage door may open and close while you train.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink" button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink" buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink" to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink"” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink$
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink" button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,) The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
used at any time.
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink$ Button
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink" button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
while you press and release - every two seconds follow these steps:
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until HomeLink" 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink" button for Troubleshooting Tips
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # If you are having trouble programming HomeLink", here
are some of the most common solutions:
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- •
ming HomeLink" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
•
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
•
in your vehicle.
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indiwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
vidual channels cannot be erased.
General Information
The HomeLink" Universal Transceiver is disabled when
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference that may be POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
received including interference that may cause undesired The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go). Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
Pinch Protect Feature
pressed.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- Venting Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will minimize the buffeting or open any window.
stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Sunshade Operation
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the the glass panel.
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
open.
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
Wind Buffeting
this feature.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR" knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
The center console power outlet is powered directly from Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the
the battery (power available at all times).
battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.
3
Center Console Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
3
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped
The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Rear Cupholders
CONSOLE FEATURES
Sliding Center Console Armrest
The center console armrest slides forward with three
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use
and shifting ease.
Sliding Console Armrest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt
power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold
various size coins). The center console may also be
equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod" and
iPhone" devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
Center Console
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
! Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
! Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
! Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 174
! Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 184
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 188
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ System Warnings
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 198
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
! Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 201
! Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 202
▫ Operation Instructions —
CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . 205
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 210
! Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 211
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 221
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 221
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
! iPod"/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 226
▫ Connecting The iPod" Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
▫ Controlling The iPod" Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 232
! Kicker" High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
! Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
! CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
! Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 236
! Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . 237
▫ Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Compartment
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Heated Seat Switch
ESP OFF Switch
Hazard Warning Switch
Climate Control
9 — Ignition Switch
10 — Trunk Release Button
11 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
1. Fuel Gauge
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
area.
2. Trip Odometer Button
6. Charging System Warning Light
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
This light shows the status of the electrical chargeither of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
ing system. The light should turn on when the
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN and remain on
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
reset it.
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
3. Speedometer
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
Indicates vehicle speed.
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
speed control is on.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is placed in ON/
RUN. This light will also turn on while the
engine is running if there is a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. The
CAUTION!
light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However,
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
If the light is flashing when the engine is running, (116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
immediate service is required. In this case, you may the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
the light does not come on during starting.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
10. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFF
immediately and serviced as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
If this indicator light flashes during accelera- (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
WARNING!
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
If the warning light remains on, the system may not
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
or BAS. You should adjust your speed and stopping
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
distance to account for this lack of the feature or you
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil- could be in an accident and be seriously injured. You
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake should take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition 14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. They should
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warnlight should turn on momentarily when the engine
ing Light” comes on continuously with the engine run- is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
ning, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
the BAS system. If this light remains on after several chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several on.
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. 17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Only
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
15. High Beam Indicator
automatic transmission.
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever 18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
high beam.
lights are on.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for
additional information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
exist. For further information, refer to Electronic Vehicle
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
Information Center (EVIC).
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
“Check Gascap” message will display in the odometer remain on until the condition has been corrected.
display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
tion.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiThis light will flash at a fast rate for approxinates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
until the vehicle is disarmed.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
low tire pressure telltale.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and
to continue to function properly.
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feaThis
system
conveniently allows the driver to select a
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
variety
of
useful
information by pressing the switches
instrument cluster.
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• System Status
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
4
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect™ phone Displays (If Equipped)
• Uconnect™ gps Screens (If Equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
• Surround Sound Modes (if equipped with DriverSelectable Surround [DSS])
• Performance Features
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU Button
SELECT Button
Press and release the MENU button to access
Press and release the SELECT button for access
the main menu, or to return to the main menu
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a perfrom the sub-menus.
sonal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Displays
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
System Setup) and sub-menus.
the following messages:
DOWN Button
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
downward through the main menus and subeither turn signal on)
menus.
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Did Not Train
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK • Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Door Ajar
• Service TPM System (with a single chime)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in •
motion)
•
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
• Oil Change Required
•
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
•
• Channel # Transmit
•
• Channel # Training
•
• Channel # Trained
•
• Clearing Channels
• Channels Cleared
ESP Off
Check Gascap
Key Fob Battery Low
Service Keyless System
Wrong Key
Damaged Key
Key not Programmed
Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”)
• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
• Distance To Empty
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do • Trip A
not start the engine.)
• Trip B
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
• Elapsed Time
within 10 seconds.
• Display Units of Measure in
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Press the UP or DOWN button to cycle through the Trip
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
functions, press the SELECT button to select a feature.
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
To access, press and release the MENU button until “Trip
Functions” appears in the EVIC, then press and release
the SELECT button.
The Trip Functions include the following:
• Average Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and
average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank
level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of or START position.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Display Units of Measure in
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
to a text display of %LOW FUEL.% This display will
To Reset The Display
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
%LOW FUEL% text and a new DTE value will display.
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
Trip A
resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
a second time within three seconds of resetting the The Performance Features include the following:
currently-displayed function (>Reset ALL will display
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
during this three-second window).
• Braking Distance
Performance Features
• 1/8 Mile
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “Performance Features” appears in
the EVIC, then press and release the SELECT button.
Press the UP or DOWN button to cycle through the
features. Press the SELECT button to select a feature.
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,
press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds.
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for Braking Distance
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
10 seconds.
depressed.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when • This feature will only function when applying the
conditions are met for the event to begin.
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph •
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
•
• The time will continue to display until the SELECT
button is pressed.
•
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
time and display the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph
•
(0-100 km/h) time.
Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
The word “READY” will flash when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to • Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
display until the SELECT button is pressed.
and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run.
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run • To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,
and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds.
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/
4 mile).
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal) along with a friction circle that
displays the directions of the forces.
Peak G-Force
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi- values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
tions are met for the event to begin.
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• The time and speed will continue to display until the • Pressing the SELECT button will clear the peak force
SELECT button is pressed.
values.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Digital Speedometer
When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and
records top speed.
• Press and hold the SELECT button for three seconds to
toggle between current speed and top speed.
• To reset top speed, quickly press and release the
SELECT button when top speed is displayed.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go
icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing
the new ignition switch position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat- While in the Surround Sound menu, press the SELECT
button to change surround modes. The Video Surround
ing” for more information.
Mode will only be available for video media sources
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
(DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media supported by
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
the radio).
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
Compass Display
always re-appears.
The compass readings indicate the direction
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
If Equipped
MENU button until “Compass” displays in the
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
EVIC, then press and release the SELECT butMENU
Sound” displays in the EVIC, then press and release the
Button ton. Press SELECT to display one of eight
SELECT button. The EVIC provides information on the
compass readings and the outside temperature.
current surround mode.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
• Stereo
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
• Video Surround
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
• Audio Surround
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “CALIBRATE
COMPASS” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC.
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal differences and provide the most accurate compass headSettings displays in the EVIC.
ing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “COMPASS
VARIANCE” message and the last variance zone number
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the MENU button to exit.
System Warnings
(Customer Information Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “System Warnings” displays in the EVIC, then press and release the
SELECT button. Press the UP or DOWN button to
display any one of the following choices.
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
SELECT button while in this display to select English,
Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ language selection. Refer to “Uconnect™ phone” in “UnderTHE SPARE TIRE).
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
Personal Settings
information.
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
features when the transmission is in PARK.
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal SetTo make your selection, press and release the SELECT
tings displays in the EVIC, then press the SELECT button.
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
following choices.
When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the
Language
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
When in this display, you may select one of three NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip make your selection, press and release the SELECT
functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the flash lights on
lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
Headlamps On with Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or
“90” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “OFF,”
“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front
vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped) Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
can be changed between English and Metric units of Manual located on the DVD for further details.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
side of the radio faceplate.
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Media Center 130 (RES)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second AM/FM Button
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
mid-range tones.
Memory
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third When you are receiving a station that you wish to
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
treble tones.
this station and press and release that button. If a button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
the front and rear speakers.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
button number will display.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC Button
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as %keep disc open after
writing% are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator %.% and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator %.% and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fearadio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
tures If Your Vehicle”.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
Electronic Volume Control
If Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “UnderON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
volume and to the left decreases it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
SEEK Buttons
screen.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- knob to save time change.
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
TIME Button
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
and radio frequency.
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
Program Type
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is AM/FM Button
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
station and press and release that button. If a button is
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
the following items:
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
button number will display.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC/AUX Button
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
dom Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Discs created with an option such as %keep disc open after
writing% are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator %.% and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator %.% and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to %elapsed time% display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to %elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time% priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Access
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiservice that is included with the factory-installed satellite tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until %SAT% appears in the display. A
form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
cause signal blockage.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
(Satellite) Mode
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availseconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
lected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
type.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Sirius subscription.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows an iPod" or external USB device to be
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
iPod" control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod"
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
and iPhone" devices. Some iPod" software versions may
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The not fully support the iPod" control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
Features If Your Vehicle”.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
iPod" or external USB device support capability.
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod"/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate • Connecting an iPod" or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
plays media, but does not use the iPod" /MP3 control
iPod"/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
feature to control the connected device.
an option with these radios.
iPod$/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Connecting The iPod$ Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod" or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod"/USB/MP3 control system (iPod" or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod"/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod"/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod" contents. faceplate may be used to control the iPod" or external
USB device and display data:
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
audio device)
Controlling The iPod$ Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod"/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
%USB% or %Switch to USB%. Once in the iPod"/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod"/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod" or external USB device automatically starts Play
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say %Next Track%.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say %Previous Track%
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will • Press the SCAN button to use iPod"/USB/MP3 dejump backward or forward respectively, for five
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
seconds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previlist, or press the VR button and say %Next or Previous
ous and next tracks.
Track%.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod" or external USB
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
device, or press the VR button and say %Shuffle ON% or
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
%Shuffle Off%. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say %Repeat ON% or %Repeat
Off%.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod" displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod" or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod" or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod" or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod" or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod" or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod" or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod" or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. After the %Ready% prompt and the following beep, say
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the %Setup%, then %Select Audio Devices%.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
Next Track
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Streaming Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
previous track music on your cellular phone.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
and played.
current song that is playing will display info.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
KICKER$ HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
sound from any stereo audio source. A new feature of the
KICKER" audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel simulated surround audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Depending on the audio source, the output may
sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
after the current track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Operation
Operation of the system is quite simple.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati- 1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once the
comfort level is selected, the system will
maintain that level automatically using
the heating system. Should the desired
comfort level require air conditioning,
the system will automatically make the adjustment.
Automatic Temperature Control
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
automatic blower operation, turn the
NOTE:
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
mode there are seven blower speeds
without affecting automatic operation.
that can be individual selected. In off
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
position the blower will shut off.
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates Manual Operation
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the This system offers a full complement of manual override
air conditioning is not necessary.
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
NOTE:
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
the Mode control dial. Press this butfloor mode in order to improve window clearing.
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
modes are selected.
manual compressor operation is selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
• Recirculation Control
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
The system will automatically control recircupress the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
Control button will put the system in recircuinterior air to condense on windows and hamper
lation mode. This can be used when outside
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculathe control button to illuminate.
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Operating Tips
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
suggested control settings for various weather condi- fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
tions.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
! Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
! Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 249
! Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 250
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ! Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 261
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or !29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 264
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 264
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
! AutoStick" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
! Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
! Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 282
! Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
! Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual
Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
! Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
! Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 276
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 277
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 285
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
! Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 295
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 296 ! Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 309
! Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Rotation – Four Season/Rsa Tires . . . . . 310
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Rotation – F1 Three Season Tires . . . . . . 310
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ! Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 311
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ F1 Three-Season Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . 303
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ! Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
! Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 319
! Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
5
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
! Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
! Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
! Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 324
! Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 325
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle — Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
— Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting With Integrated Key – Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
before shifting into any driving gear.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing The Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button –
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF Manual Transmission Only
position.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
Normal Starting
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button –
Automatic Transmission Only
To start the engine, press and hold the clutch pedal while
pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10
accelerator pedal.
to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proceTo start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or dure. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press- to the engine starting, release the button.
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
START/STOP Button – Automatic Transmission
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
Only
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button – Manual Transmission Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
position.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
OFF position.
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
the engine is not running.
5
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to the OFF position.
to change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or !29°C)
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
follow these steps.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) – Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather% procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) – Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather% procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
5
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist& in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result
in damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- Shifting
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
warms up. This is normal.
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
Manual Shifter
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
CAUTION!
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
NOTE:
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting • Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
from a standing position.
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
Recommended Shift Speeds
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recomwith the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN
mended shift speed chart.
position for Keyless Enter-N-Go) as compared to the
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
This is normal operation of the transmission reverse
inhibitor system.
1-4
4-5
5-6
mph
20
37
48
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
(77)
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is displayed, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from
first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission
to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
Downshifting
1–4 Skip Shift
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downThere are times when you must shift the transmission shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first grade.
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
WARNING!
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
could have a collision.
in first gear, and the accelerator is at 1/4 throttle or less.
The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed
during these times.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle
is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you
could damage the engine and/or clutch.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
5
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
• Shift lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
tomatically, dependent upon:
the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position
with Keyless Enter-N-Go) before restarting. Transmis• Altitude
sion engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
• Vehicle loading
after restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the
LOCK position (OFF position with Keyless Enter-N• Driving style
Go) first.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift
lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave unattended children inside a
vehicle.
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal
operation.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Enter-N-Go). To
move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the
ignition switch must be turned to any other ignition
position (ACC, ON/RUN or START) whether the engine
is running or not, and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK position. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that REVERSE
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
seated.
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shift lever could result if the shift
lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is
turned from the LOCK (OFF position with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) to ON position (RUN position with
Keyless Enter-N-Go).
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers), use the AutoStick" mode and select the “3”
range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imDRIVE
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
This range should be used for most city and highway
achieve maximum efficiency.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downTemporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
shifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
transmission, use the following procedure:
as soon as possible.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF AUTOSTICK$
AutoStick" is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
position with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
the vehicle. AutoStick" allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
5. Restart the engine.
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the can also provide you with more control during passing,
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
return to normal operation.
trailer towing, and many other situations.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick" mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When you wish to engage AutoStick", simply move the
shift lever to the right (D+) or left (D-) while in the DRIVE
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish
to disengage AutoStick", hold the shift lever to the right
for at least two seconds. The transmission will now
NOTE:
operate automatically, shifting between the five available
• In AutoStick" mode, the transmission will shift up and
gears.
down when the driver manually moves the shift lever
General Information
right (D+) or left (D-).
Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be
moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to
the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an
upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument
cluster on the transmission range indicator.
• An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic • You can start out in first or second gear. The system
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the inwill ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
strument cluster when using AutoStick". This message
speed or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed..
appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the
• The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st
next gear. The UPSHIFT message will display while
gear when coming to a stop.
operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per
minute (RPM).
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick" is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick" is
engaged.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
• Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when
Traction
AutoStick" is engaged.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
Acceleration
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precaupery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull tions should be observed:
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
the rear (driving) wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
visible.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
(LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of
wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
CAUTION!
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches
(100 mm) deep may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
5
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerThe standard power steering system will give you good
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
steering capability if power assist is lost.
does not in any way damage the steering system.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
Enter-N-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrubrake should always be applied whenever the driver is
ment cluster will illuminate.
not in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmisThe foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
5
Parking Brake Release
Parking Brake
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for axle.
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
related motor noises. These noises are the system perwith the power system operating.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
5
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce possible.
accurate signals for the computer.
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is
required.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic Operating” for further information.
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the
WARNING!
Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
and control in various driving conditions.
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resultAn additional electronic brake control feature called Hill ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
models.
of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a
This can help reduce braking distances.
limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “Electronic is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Stability Program (ESP)” in this section for more information.
NOTE: The LSD is a true LSD and the TCS function is
similar to a limited-slip differential.
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backOnly
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has three available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF”
switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the
ESP OFF Switch
“ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
will turn off.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP
OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momen- “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Untarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informawhile the vehicle is in motion.
tion. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily press the “ESP
OFF” switch.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use NOTE: The %ESP OFF% message will display and the
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turned into the PARK position from any position other than
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
“ESP OFF” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is will occur when the message was previously cleared.
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
WARNING!
chime will sound, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the %ESP OFF% message will display in the
In the ESP “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
vehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMreduction and stability features are cancelled. ThereETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
this message. The “ESP OFF” message may appear in the
unavailable.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
NOTE: When the ESP is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESP OFF” switch.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
running.
WARNING!
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
With the ESP switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESP mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Tire Markings
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
NOTE:
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designamolded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter %P% is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
CAUTION!
Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels,
as this can result in rear axle damage.
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
&....blank....& = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— %R% means radial construction
—%D% means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
&....blank....& = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and paslbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
(392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure
information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiF1 Three-Season Tires — If Equipped
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
This vehicle may be equipped with wheel and tires to
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
enhance performance. To continue to provide this perforserious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
mance, extra care should be taken when operating your
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
vehicle.
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
These low-profile high performance tires are not designed for off-road or winter (snow or cold weather)
conditions, and their noise, ride, and wear will be different than non-performance tires.
WARNING!
Do not use these tires when temperatures are below
40°F (4°C) or in snow/ice conditions. You could lose
control and have an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
Tire Spinning
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. Only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20 size
tires.
(Continued) NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by
the manufacture.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
(Continued) traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only different loads and perform different steering, driving,
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
safety and handling of your vehicle.
unequal rates.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainWhile studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and tenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing
rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation – Four Season/RSA Tires
Tire Rotation – F1 Three Season Tires
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in shown in the following diagram. This method is required
the following diagram.
due to different size tires on the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
NOTE:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
the tire.
or condition.
Premium System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure.
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
• Receiver module,
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale • Four TPM sensors,
Light.”
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE” message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
flashing.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value.
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update, the graphic display in
the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light”
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM% message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
is not being received.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM% message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
The EVIC will also display a %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM%
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM%
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM% message is displayed.
the TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
compact spare tire.
wheel housings.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. In “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
flashing pressure value.
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
information.
addition, the EVIC will display a %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM% message for a minimum of five seconds and then General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
following conditions:
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will • This device may not cause harmful interference.
display a %SERVICE TPM SYSTEM% message for a mini• This device must accept any interference received,
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
including interference that may cause undesired
place of the pressure value.
operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiing licenses:
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4 endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
6.4L Engine
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomThe 6.4L engine is designed to meet all mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speciemissions regulations and provide excel- fications if they are available.
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded Reformulated Gasoline
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
higher.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are speLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at prove air quality.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E-85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• change the engine oil and oil filter
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
nia reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
Materials Added to Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
exposure to E-85 fuel.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
(Continued)
cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
CAUTION!
Fuel Fill Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle
indicated.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the rear of the driver’s door.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information:
GVWR.
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle —
Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle —
Manual Transmission
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
! Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
! If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 ! Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
! TIREFIT Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ! Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ With Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped . . . 348
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 333 ! Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Without The Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) — Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . 349
! Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
6
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) — Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch
bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
6
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116 °C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT
Small punctures up to 1⁄4 in (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
6
1. Sealant Bottle
TIREFIT Location
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Power Button
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting
this mode.
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
Selecting Air Mode
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
kit.
Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use. After each use, always replace these
components immediately at an authorized dealer.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is
only intended to seal punctures less than 1⁄4 in (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
WARNING!
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
discarded.
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
the TIREFIT kit.
TIREFIT kit.
(Continued)
6
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
− If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
− If the tire has any sidewall damage.
− If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
− If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
− If the wheel has any damage.
− If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
6
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
nails) from the tire.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Tire:
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the
TIREFIT kit.
FIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
the TIREFIT kit.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomlonger flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 sec- mended inflation pressure before continuing.
onds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6),
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar).
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to panel.
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
6
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire serfurther. Call for assistance.
vice center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door open- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the auing.
thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the TIREFIT service kit.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
6
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpit accordingly.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
ing.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked precautions.
into place.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
charged battery.
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REvehicle.
VERSE and DRIVE/1st Gear. Using minimal accelerator
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without
you should have the battery and charging system in- spinning the wheels, is most effective.
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program,” or “Traction Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between REVERSE and DRIVE/1st Gear, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located to
the right of the shift lever.
6
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
override tab through the access port on the center conWith Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped
sole.
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
STOP button once or twice to go to the ON/RUN
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the instructions shown above to activate the override.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) —
Automatic Transmissions
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission is permitted within the following limitations:
With The Key Fob
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL
CAUTION!
• If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 mi (24 km) or
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h), then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
Otherwise, damage to the transmission may result.
• Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN
(24 km)
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) mission remains in NEUTRAL.
6
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) —
Manual Transmissions
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with a manual transmission is permitted within the following limitations:
With The Key Fob
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi
(24 km)
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• If the transmission is not operative then the only
approved method of towing is with a flatbed
truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may
result.
• Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans- A Tow Dolly
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! Engine Compartment — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
! Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 357
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
! Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
! Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
! Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
! Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
7
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
! Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual
Transmission) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
! Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 379
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 380
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models With
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . 396
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models
With High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
! Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
! Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
! Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
! Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 402
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
7
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
7
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR" parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR" parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Change Engine Oil
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, SAE 5W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating
temperatures.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725
and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5 (will be listed
on the back label of the oil container).
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomThe manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
are followed.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, maintenance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
WARNING!
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
your area.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
at every engine oil change.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
Engine Oil Filter Selection
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
serious personal injury.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR" engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR" engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
Battery Location
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR"
oil, and refrigerants.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the
Body Lubrication
lock cylinder.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Windshield Wiper Blades
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
MOPAR" Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaquiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and tions of salt or road film.
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
7
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
flush out the residual water.
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependwasher fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
necessary.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
7
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for
Keyless Enter-N-Go). The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch
is in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless
Enter-N-Go).
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
7
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old
antifreeze solution.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
maintenance intervals.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
Selection Of Coolant
leaks.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. ReWith the engine at normal operating temperature (but
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Mainnot running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolants. Use of propylene
glycol-based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR"
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
7
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below !34°F (!37°C) are
anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant
and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from
the coolant recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
WARNING!
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthe cooling system pressure cap are a safety pretain the proper level of protection against freezing accaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
the vehicle is operated.
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scaldNOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
the system is hot or under pressure.
will require more frequent coolant changes.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your be checked once a month.
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open not overfill.
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency Points To Remember
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
immediately.
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is norCoolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
7
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
enter the radiator.
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
condenser clean.
the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
also be protected against freezing.
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
mileage, and increased emissions.
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
WARNING!
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. ReMaster Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
7
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
WARNING! (Continued)
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be at the
bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain
the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuUse only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or information.
moisture.
Change Transmission Fluid
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) –
If Equipped
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perforCAUTION!
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- the chemicals can damage your transmission compotion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main- nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended Vehicle Limited Warranty.
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
Special Additives
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Rear Axle
Fluid Level Check
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the fluid level
reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Axle Fluid
What Causes Corrosion?
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
maintenance intervals.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR" Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
completely with clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR" Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR"
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to Special Care
scratch the paint.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
a month.
finish.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
CAUTION!
and open.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
considered the responsibility of the owner.
(Continued)
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
7
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR" or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
the owner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
finish.
packaged and sealed.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
If Equipped
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man• Use MOPAR" Touch Up Paint or equivalent on ner:
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a • For tough stains, apply MOPAR" Total Clean or
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR"
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
and MOPAR" Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
protectants on Stain Repel products.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
Interior Care
Use MOPAR" Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
upholstery and MOPAR" Carpet Cleaner or equivalent your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condifor carpeting.
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR" Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR" Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All". Use MOPAR" Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR" Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass; and therefore, When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
Glass Surfaces
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with a clean damp rag.
with MOPAR" Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Seat Belt Maintenance
FUSES
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
Integrated Power Module
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR" Total Clean or
equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do
not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
7
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Integrated Power Module
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
1
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—
7
—
8
—
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
30 Amp
Green
Description
Washer Motor
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Ignition Run/Start
EGR Solenoid/
Alternator
Powertrain Control
Module
Ignition Coils/
Injectors
Headlamp Washer
Relay – If Equipped
Starter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
9
—
10
30 Amp
Pink
11
30 Amp
Pink
12
40 Amp
Green
13
50 Amp
Red
14
—
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
—
Windshield Wiper
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan Lo/
High
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Motor
—
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
15
50 Amp
Red
16
—
17
—
18
—
19
—
20
—
21
—
22
—
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Access Panel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
1
60 Amp
Yellow
2
3
4
40 Amp
Green
—
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Cavity 1 of the
Rear Power Distribution Center contains a black IOD
fuse needed for vehicle processing during assembly. The
service replacement
part is a 60 Amp yellow cartridge fuse.
Integrated Power
Module (IPM)
—
Integrated Power
Module (IPM)
7
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
5
30 Amp
Pink
6
—
7
—
8
—
9
—
10
—
11 *
—
MiniFuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
—
Description
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Fuel Pump
Audio Amplifier – If
Equipped
Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)/
Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN)
Power Outlet
Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
—
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
12 *
—
13 *
—
14
—
15
16
—
—
17
—
18
—
19
—
20
—
MiniFuse
—
—
10 Amp
Red
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
Description
—
—
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security
Module – If
Equipped
—
Heated Seat Module
– If Equipped
Instrument Cluster
Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel)
Stop Lights
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
21
—
22
—
23
—
24
—
25
—
26
—
27
—
28
—
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run, AC
Heater Control/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
29
—
MiniFuse
5 Amp
Orange
30
—
10 Amp
Red
31
32
33
34
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 Amp
Orange
Description
Cluster/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP)/Powertrain
Control Module
(PCM)/STOP LIGHT
Switch
Door Modules/
Power Mirrors/
Steering Control
Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
Antenna Module – If
Equipped/Power
Mirrors
7
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
36
—
37
—
38
—
39
—
40
—
41
42
—
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Orange
—
—
Description
Hands-Free Phone –
If Equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
Transmission
Cargo Light/Vehicle
Information Module
– If Equipped
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
Auto Inside Rearview
Mirror/Heated Seats
– If Equipped/Switch
Bank
—
Front Blower Motor
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
43
30 Amp
Pink
44
20 Amp
Blue
MiniFuse
—
—
Description
Rear Window Defroster
Amplifier/Sunroof –
If Equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
window switch, and the passenger power window
switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
battery.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder . . . . . . . . LED
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
started again.
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
7
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb Number
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) . . . . . D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Halogen Headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side
to disengage the clip.
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
7
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.
4. Pull back the trunk liner.
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.
7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
14. Close the trunk.
install the replacement bulb.
7
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-40, API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR" Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19 Gallons
Metric
72 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
7
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR" Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725
and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
MOPAR" Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
LZTR6AP11EG (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR" ATF+4" Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4" product.
MOPAR" ATF+4" Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4" product.
MOPAR" DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
MOPAR" Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR" ATF+4" Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4" product.
MOPAR" Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5) or equivalent
(with MOPAR" Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
! Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 408
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
NOTE:
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disilluminated.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance E
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odomvehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
further information.
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
At Each Stop for Fuel
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vemessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
hicle” for further information.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
required.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
CAUTION!
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
S
C
needed.
H
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
D
operation.
U
L
E
S
8
At Each Oil Change
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 M
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 M
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 M
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
N
T 54 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 102,000 miles (170 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 M
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 M
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped).
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.*
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
N
T 102 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 M
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
N
T 126 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 M
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
A ❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
N ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
C ❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
E ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 M
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Date
Dealer Code
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
! Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
! Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
! MOPAR" Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
! If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
! Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 428
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 428
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
! Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
9
426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
! Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR$ PARTS
MOPAR" fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
436 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,279
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,282
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 373
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 363
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,366
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,65
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64,68,81,176
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,62,64,65
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 60,62,65
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,282
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,281
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,401
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
INDEX 437
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 237
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,380,381
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,403
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . 267
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 26
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,81
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,377
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,282
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,403
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,279
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,377
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 79
10
438 INDEX
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,396 Check Engine Light
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,395 (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71,72,75,77
Caps, Filler
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,75
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Cleaning
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,212
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,322 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,236 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
INDEX 439
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 226
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 374
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 372,401,402
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,387
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,240
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
10
440 INDEX
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 390
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 148
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 175
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 184
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 358
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,402
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,322
INDEX 441
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,401,402
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,401
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 66
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exhaust
Exhaust
Exterior
Exterior
Exterior
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,322
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,369
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,402
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,142,176
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10
442 INDEX
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,178
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,402
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,357
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
INDEX 443
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,26,123,269,317
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 143
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,147
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Hazard
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 143
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 152
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10
444 INDEX
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,174
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,194,251
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,194
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 74,75
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
INDEX 445
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,395
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,139
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64,68,81,176
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,281
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,279
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,396
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,151
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . 142,143
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 289
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . 175
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,178
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,396
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . 140,147
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,178
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,174
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,151
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 183
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,151
10
446 INDEX
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . 144
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,151
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,396
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 181,311
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,142,176
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 174
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,327
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,75
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 183,358
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,379,381
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,381
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
INDEX 447
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,151
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,430
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,62,66
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60,62,65
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,402
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,402
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,402
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
10
448 INDEX
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,401
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,401
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,358
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,431
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 296
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 161
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,275
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
INDEX 449
Programming Transmitters
Remote Control
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 234
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 374 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10
450 INDEX
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,45,81
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71,72,77
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,47
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 372,402
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
INDEX 451
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,212
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,264
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 243
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,142,176
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,249
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,275
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
10
452 INDEX
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,395
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 56
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 237
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 175,332
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 296
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,300,433
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 311
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
INDEX 453
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,300
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,264,380
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259,261
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 152
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,42
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,176
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10
454 INDEX
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 226
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,325,327
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,395
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,146,368
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,161
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
INDEX 455
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,240
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,146,368
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
145
367
145
145
10
456 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2011 Challenger S RT8
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11D492-126-AE
2011
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
Challenger S RT8
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement